2012 Ram Chassis Cab

2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Ra m Tr u c k
CHASSIS CAB
Chrysler Group LLC
12DD43-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
dents. described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per-
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
Never drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op- are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
erating procedures that could result in a collision or assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce- applicable manufacturer.
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body support. For service issues, contact your authorized
modifications or special equipment installed by van dealer.
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
the windshield. This number also appears on the bottom
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
of the frame rail, on the right hand side, near the center
turer.
of the vehicle and underbody as well as the Automobile
Operating instructions for the special equipment in- Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 19
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 49
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Power Windows – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 77
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 57
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
Equipped
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system. This
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
(RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
released from the START position, the switch automati-
with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
into the ignition switch with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi- 2
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
then pull the key out with your other hand. automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 min-
Emergency Key Removal utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key position. Opening either front door will cancel this
into the lock cylinder with either side up. feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
WARNING!
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re- 2
CAUTION! move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
• Charge the battery. do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
WARNING! (Continued)
ter (EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may SENTRY KEY姞
cause serious injury or death. The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
CAUTION!
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always or unlocked.
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The
NOTE: system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
CAUTION!
considered an invalid key.
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
ible with some after-market remote starting systems. 2
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
problems and loss of security protection.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after Replacement Keys
two seconds.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
• If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized
CAUTION!
dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs
tended. must then be reprogrammed.
Customer Key Programming
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
performed at an authorized dealer.
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. General Information
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob subject to the following conditions:
is one that has never been programmed.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:
• This device must accept any interference that may be
• When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System
received, including interference that may cause unde-
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
sired operation.
rized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve- power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are 2
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au- locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
dible and visible signals, for the first three minutes the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
To Disarm The System
turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
Rearming Of The System has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
additional minutes of headlights turning on and Vehicle doors and the exterior lights will blink three times. Check
Security Light flashing, if the system has not been the vehicle for tampering.
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and moni-
tor the remaining doors and ignition.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro- ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
grammed Sentry Key威 is inserted into the ignition The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
switch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE trans- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
mitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry doors or open any door.
Key威 into the ignition switch.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- ther information.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
Security System Manual Override
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF 2

EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Key Fob with RKE
transmitter. The transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving Remote Unlock The Doors
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is
RKE transmitters. setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated button while still holding the LOCK button.
entry system will also turn on.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
removed.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
its previous setting.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
information. Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
following procedure:
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change removed. 2
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
information.
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
following procedure: Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed To Lock The Doors
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
while still holding the UNLOCK button. the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
information.
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Using The Panic Alarm
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still hold- least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
ing the LOCK button. the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph battery.
(8 km/h) or greater. 2
NOTE:
NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
housing or the printed circuit board.
and horn will remain on.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
during removal.
by the system.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
Programming Additional Transmitters
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
contact your authorized dealer for details.
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
halves together. distance, check for these two conditions:
General Information 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received, This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
operation. niently from outside the vehicle while still
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- maintaining security. The system has a range of
proved by the party responsible for compliance could approximately 300 ft (91 m).
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans-
mitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
WARNING!
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start: • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- 2
• Shift lever in PARK
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
• Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Hood closed
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
• HAZARD switch off away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• Fuel meets minimum requirement vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position. in the Remote Start mode.
To Enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
Press and release the REMOTE START button 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the third cycle.
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
NOTE: Vehicle
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors. allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system message “Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will display in
Start request. 2
the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON/
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release Center (EVIC)” for further information.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
(if equipped). Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
NOTE: vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position remote start is activated. These features will stay on
in order to drive the vehicle. through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/ The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Key Fob into the ignition switch. Once inserted, the Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
WARNING!
Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel”. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
DOOR LOCKS cause serious injury or death.
Manual Door Locks • For personal security and safety in the event of an
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up. well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
without lifting the lock knob.
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
closed. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle. (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- 2
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch Location

A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim 1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov-
ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis-
remove the Key Fob. abled as follows:
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Panel” for further information.
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor-
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
dance with local laws.
Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
WARNING!
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
opened by using the outside door handle even if the from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
inside door lock is in the unlocked position. engaged.
NOTE: WINDOWS
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
Power Windows – If Equipped
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Power Window Switches

1 – Left Front 3 – Right Rear
2 – Right Front 4 – Left Rear
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
WARNING!
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
the front passenger door for passenger window control unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a 2
and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models. The number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 min- ignition. A child could operate power windows,
utes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door other controls, or move the vehicle.
is opened.
Auto-Down
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
first detent, release, and the window will go down
either front door is opened.
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, op-
erate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex-
and release it when you want the window to stop. pectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
window manually.
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
window before closing.
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Auto-Up Reset
the first detent and release when you want the window to It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
stop. Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open. 2
Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors, press the window LOCK button
into the latched or down position. To enable the window
controls, press the window LOCK button again and
return the switch to the released or up position. Window Lockout Switch
1 – Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or in partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear • All seat belt systems (except driver’s regular/Crew
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front Cab威, first and second row center position for Crew
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. Cab威 only) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
vehicle are the restraint systems: for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and infant and child restraint systems. For further informa-
all passengers tion, refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH)”.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger — if equipped NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
wheel severity and type of collision.
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
WARNING!
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of 2
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are be belted at all times.
buckled up properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
far away from home or on your own street.
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in belts are designed to go around the large bones of
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured your body. These are the strongest parts of your
or killed. body and can take the forces of a collision best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
belts. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
using a seat belt properly.
sengers safe, too.
(Continued) • Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Removing Slack From Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t allow the belt to retract fully.
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING!
possible and keep it snug.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
ately and have it fixed. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
etc.) or if the air bag deployed.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be 2
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the seat belt
tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle. The
black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat
belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor
to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats. Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible “click”. For proper seat belt usage, refer
“Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.
WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle. Inserting Latch Plate
WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an 2
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
In Use Position the black latch and black buckle.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
away from your neck. Press the button located on the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the it is locked in position.
position that fits you best.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Regular Cab
WARNING!
Left Center Right
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous. First Row N/A ALR ALR
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down 2
and under the belt in a collision. • N/A — Not Applicable
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is Crew Cab威
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug. Left Center Right
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Second Row ALR Cinch ALR
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or • N/A — Not Applicable
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
restraint system. For additional information refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below ALR and is being used for normal usage:
defines the type of feature for each seating position. Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing the entire belt is extracted.
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is
ably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
Equipped
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
gency) locking mode.
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating Center Lap Belts — Crew Cab威 Only
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children The front center seating position has a lap belt only. To
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
in the rear seat whenever possible. until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(BeltAlert姞) (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and notification.
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger 2
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
fastened.
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
tivating BeltAlert威.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
the extender when not needed.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Seat Belt Extender Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bag
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, your This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt driver and front passenger (if equipped) as a supplement
extender. This extender should be used only if the to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering
remove the extender and store it. wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
air bag covers.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision. 2
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
1 — Driver And Passenger 2 — Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bags
(if equipped) NOTE:
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for but they will open during air bag deployment.
Advanced Air Bags.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an Advanced Front Air Bag Features
authorized dealer immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger (if equipped) air bags. This
Air Bag System Components
system provides output appropriate to the severity and
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
system components:
Controller (ORC).
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Air Bag Warning Light impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Steering Wheel and Column
used for more severe collisions.
• Instrument Panel
WARNING!
• Knee Impact Bolster
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
inflate.
and Seat Track Position Sensors
(Continued)
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may Children 12 years old and under should always ride
damage the air bags and you could be injured buckled up in a rear seat. 2
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are WARNING!
designed to open only when the air bags are Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never
inflating. ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
any way. cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster tion.
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Knee Impact Bolsters secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu- child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
their arm. Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
You should read the instructions provided with your
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder Always wear your seat belts even though you have
belts properly. air bags.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
Bags room to inflate. could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On 2
required for this vehicle.
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
The ORC determines if deployment of the front air bags impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC deploys severe initial deceleration.
the Advanced Front Air Bags, and front seat belt preten-
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
sioners — if equipped, as required, depending on several
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
factors, including the severity and type of impact.
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- have deployed.
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
away from an inflating air bag.
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side or rollover collisions.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
air bag system immediately.
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
Inflator Units vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering 2
Enhanced Accident Response System
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel (if
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
equipped). When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the communication network remains intact, and the
the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever-
ing functions:
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out • Cut off fuel to the engine.
of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is
until the ignition key is turned off.
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
driver and front passenger. the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
If A Deployment Occurs
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately.
immediately after deployment.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
NOTE: Front air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
system.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
or all of the following may occur: irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2
WARNING!
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
Deployed air bags cannot protect you in another be injured if the air bag system is not there to
collision. Have the air bags replaced by an autho- protect you. Do not modify the components or
rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag inflate for your protection in a collision. The
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components. While the air
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ- bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
serviced in any way (including removal or the air bag system immediately.
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho- • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
rized dealer. eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint were buckled/fastened;
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly 2
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
These data can help provide a better understanding of
fuse is good.
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
crash investigation.
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
WARNING!
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
ment, can read the information if they have access to the required to hold even an infant on your lap can
vehicle or the EDR. become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
Child Restraints
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
size.
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
Infants And Child Restraints
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
the rear seats rather than in the front. be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
WARNING!
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward- the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air 2
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- injury or death to infants in this position.
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown Older Children And Child Restraints
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the tion are for children who are over two years old or who
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
WARNING!
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. • Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
All children whose weight or height is above the
air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
injury or death to infants in this position.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster collision. The child could be badly injured or
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
NOTE: For additional information, refer to used in a rear seat.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ restraint:
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in • If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle 2
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
weight and height limits.
try a different seating position.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
not work when you need it.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the WARNING!
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
collision. The child could be badly injured or
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
the buckle with the release button facing out.
(Continued)
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occu- child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
pants or seatbacks and cause serious personal their back.
injury. Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Children Too Large For Booster Seats age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend provides for the installation of the child restraint without
over the front of the seat when their back is against the using the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH
child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威 and Crew Cab rear seat outboard
as possible. positions. LATCH equipped seating positions feature
both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the seat
cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind the Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
seat back (refer to “Child Restraint Tether Anchor”). connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for 2
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: Installing The Child Restraint System
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not WARNING!
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
LATCH mechanisms in the center position of a Crew
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
Cab model with a bench rear seat. A child may be
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
placed in the rear center seating position of a Crew
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Cab bench model using the seat belt and child tether
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
anchorage. The LATCH anchorages in the rear seat
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
are designed for the two outboard seating positions
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
for Crew Cab威 with a full bench rear seat, and all
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
three positions for Crew Cab威 with a split bench rear
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
seat. Failure to follow this may result in serious or
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
fatal injury.
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
WARNING!
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with Improper installation of a child restraint to the
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or 2
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped when installing an infant or child restraint.
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchor- (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
ages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
into the seat. to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc- then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
tions that come with the child restraint system. additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
The chart below defines the seating positions with an Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
plate.
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
Regular Cab through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
Left Center Right plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
First Row N/A ALR ALR extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
• N/A — Not Applicable retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Crew Cab威 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
Left Center Right will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
First Row N/A N/A ALR pull it tight if necessary.
Second Row ALR Cinch ALR
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
• N/A — Not Applicable
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you each behind the front center and right seats. Crew Cab
hear a “click.” models have three anchorages, one behind each of the
rear seats. 2
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
WARNING!
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary. An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat, even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
preferably between the head restraint posts under- positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
neath the head restraint. child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instruc-
tions below. See your authorized dealer for help if
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
necessary.
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
(Crew Cab — Rear Seats)
Crew Cab
2
1. The tether straps loops are located between the rear
glass and the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. You can gain access to the
center seating position tether strap loop by raising the
head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and
rear seat.
Head Restraint Adjustment

2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint, through the outboard tether strap loop, then
route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind
the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the anchor loop.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and
anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either
outboard seating positions.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur- Multiple Child Restraint Crew Cab
er’s instructions.
1 — Anchor Loops
2 — Snap Hook
3 — Tether Strap
4 — Passenger’s Side Rear Child Seat
5 — Rear Center Child Seat
6 — Driver’s Side Rear Child Seat
Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For 2
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or preted as an indication of difficulty.
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
SAFETY TIPS
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided. AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING!
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
cause serious injury or death.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
follow these safety tips:
ously injured or killed.
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
confined areas any longer than needed to move
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
your vehicle in or out of the area.
belts.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
using a seat belt properly. the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, 2
the blower at high speed. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to • Always make sure that floor mats are properly
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your attached to the floor mat fasteners.
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is • Never place or install floor mats or other floor
inoperable. coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
Floor Mat Safety Information fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they top of already installed floor mats. Additional
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
WARNING!
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of have been removed for cleaning.
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- (Continued)
sonal injury.
(Continued)
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal 2
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Lights
control. Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
• If required, mounting posts must be properly while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
installed, if not equipped from the factory. beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or Door Latches
mounting can cause interference with the brake Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle. Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
The Vehicle fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
Tires located and corrected immediately.
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 92
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 87
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . 91
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . 140
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 123 䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 128
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 130
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 132
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . 136
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 148
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 137
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 3
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . 158
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 159
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 153
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 163 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Storage (Regular Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Storage And Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window —
▫ Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . 173 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Glove Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward 3
the windshield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
CAUTION!
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
moving in reverse.
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to 3
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex right side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
CAUTION!
forward or rearward to resist damage.
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls

1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Mirror Control
Power Mirror Controls To adjust a mirror, press the mirror select button for the
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction
that you want the mirror to move.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-
matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
3
Power Mirror Movement

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated by pressing the rear window
defroster button.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
Trailer Towing Position Blindspot Mirror

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
entering an automated car wash. Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
and can be adjusted separately.
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
supported phones. Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
websites:
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
• www.jeep.com/uconnect allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
• or call 1–877–855–8400
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
Any voice commanded system should be used only dio. The individual buttons are described in the
in safe driving conditions following local laws and “Operation” section.
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free 3
collision causing serious injury or death. Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
Uconnect™ Phone Button mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
The radio or steering wheel controls (if details.
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
(Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice Com-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
mand button) that will enable you to
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
access the system. When you press the button you will
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
switch), if so equipped.
is your signal to give a command.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation example, you can use the compound form voice
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone the compound form command into two voice com-
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
specific command and then guided through the available talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
options. someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
other prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”. options at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
compound form of the voice command is given. You button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
can also break the commands into parts and say each Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
part of the command when you are asked for it. For button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and and follow the audible prompts.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
few instances the system will take you back to the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
previous menu.
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN 3
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair after the initial pairing process.
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc- given a unique phone name.
tions for pairing.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions: the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• Press the button to begin.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
“Device Pairing”. allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and then dial. The number will appear in the display
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the of certain radios.
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
Call By Saying A Name
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to • Press the button to begin.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Dial By Saying A Number “Call”.
• Press the button to begin. • The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
“Dial”. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
want to call.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
then dial the corresponding phone number, which “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
may appear in the display of certain radios. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is 3
phonebook entry that you are adding.
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
“Phonebook New Entry”. main menu.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- names in the phonebook with each name having up to
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
instead of “Bob”. language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
book.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be 3
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
• Press the button to begin. mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit. NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. • Press the button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing. “Phonebook Delete”.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook “Phonebook Erase All”.
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
from the list, press the button while the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
“Phonebook List Names”. plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
your mobile service provider for the features that you
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
have.
book entries, if available.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call 3
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
Currently In Progress
button during the playing of the desired name, and
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
say “Call”.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
operations at this point. call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a single
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
• The selected number will be dialed.
Currently In Progress
Phone Call Features If a call is currently in progress and you have another
The following features can be accessed through the incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
call on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
button until you hear a single beep.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
press the button until you hear a single beep,
Progress
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
time.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is Conference Call
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
to “Conference Call” in this section. double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while “Redial”.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the 3
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into Uconnect™ Phone.
one conference call.
Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
Redial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
• An active call is automatically transferred to the book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. specific and is usable across all languages.
Uconnect™ Phone Features Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
WARNING!
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num- To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and gency, your mobile phone must be:
Mexico. • turned on,
NOTE: • paired to the Uconnect™ System, 3
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • and have network coverage.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance:
area. • Press the button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Towing Assistance”.
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
for the mobile phone directly. 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Working With Automated Systems
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in This method is used in instances where one generally has
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
Towing Assistance references. navigating through an automated telephone system.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
some systems. To do this, press the button and say mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”. service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
Paging
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Uconnect™ Phone.
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone. normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
with Automated Systems”.
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated Barge In — Overriding Prompts
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
number on a pager. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to 3
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
the voice prompt.
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone. Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE: • Press the button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature. − “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
notification to inform you of your phone and network call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
status when you are attempting to make a phone call Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
• Press the button.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile • Following the beep, say “Mute”.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command. • Press the button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin.
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”. 3
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
and say “Transfer Call”.
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone phone being announced, press the button and
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
with one electronic device at a time. paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
• You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
you wish to select. Phone
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
call. If the selected phone is not available, the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
priority phone present in or near (approximately
Voice Training
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
radio mode):
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
• Press and hold the button for five seconds until
prompts.
the session begins, or,
• Press the button and say the “Voice Training, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command. and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and Voice Command
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to 3
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
system will adapt to the last trained voice only. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Reset
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• press the button.
during a Voice Command period.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
• Performance is maximized under:
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• low road noise,
entries are not similar.
• smooth road surface,
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
• fully closed windows, be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• dry weather condition. • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some. number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise, Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
• smooth road surface,
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
• fully closed windows, ing and Missed Calls.
• dry weather conditions, and SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on 3
• operation from the driver’s seat.
your phone.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
Read Messages:
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. If you wish to hear the new message:
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Press the button.
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message: 3. Where are you?
• Press the button. 4. I need more direction.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 5. LOL
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
6. Why
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
7. I love you
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
8. Call me
To send a message, press the button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.” 9. Call me later
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10. Thanks
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
14. Are you there yet?
will then be given a choice to change it.
15. Where are we meeting?
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
16. Can this wait? Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection 3
17. Bye for now
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
18. When can we meet off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
19. Send number to call
Power-Up
20. Start without me
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- system.
sages.
• Press the button.
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts
3
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no Uconnect™ Tutorial
other try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
following conditions: mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the 3
WARNING!
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
• This device must accept any interference received, attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
including interference that may cause undesired Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
operation. serious injury or death.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED When you press the Voice Command button, you
Voice Command System Operation will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
player, and a memo recorder. seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
options, press the Voice Command button, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
for the beep, and say your command. set to low.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
change commands. This will become helpful once you
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
start to learn the options.
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) 3
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) − “Save” (to save the memo)
− “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Switch to system setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
Command button to stop playing memos. You 3
proceed by saying one of the following commands: In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training”
Setup NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command button first and wait for the beep before
following: speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
Voice Training
WARNING!
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
ously injured or killed.
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
and will improve recognition. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” using a seat belt properly.
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Some models may be equipped with an eight-way driv-
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. er’s power seat. The power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the There are two power seat switches that are used to
vehicle. control the movement of the seat cushion and the seat-
back.
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the 3
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
Power Seat Switches cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
1 — Power Seat Switch the switch when you have reached the desired position.
2 — Power Seatback Switch
Reclining The Seatback
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
control which could cause a collision and serious the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
injury or death. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat path.
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
seat belt. Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
switch when you have reached the desired position. injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
3
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
CAUTION!
WARNING! Do not place any article under a power seat or
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
control which could cause a collision and serious movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
injury or death. path.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar — If Equipped Heated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats On some models, the front and rear seats may be
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the seatbacks.
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease WARNING!
the lumbar support.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Lumbar Control Switch

Press the switch once to select HIGH-
level heating. Press the switch a sec-
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates ond time to select LOW-level heating.
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This Press the switch a third time to shut
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a the heating elements OFF.
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
3
the seat. NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
Front Heated Seats two to five minutes.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center operate.
of the instrument panel (below the climate controls). The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and tempera-
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes
before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one
already warm. for LOW and none for OFF.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start Press the switch once to select HIGH-
On models that are equipped with remote start, the level heating. Press the switch a sec-
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on ond time to select LOW-level heating.
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System Press the switch a third time to shut
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your the heating elements OFF.
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
NOTE:
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
two to five minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
operate.
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and tempera-
ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to Press the switch once to choose HIGH,
LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat press it a second time to choose LOW.
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes Pressing the switch a third time will
before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can turn the ventilated seat OFF. When
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is HIGH speed is selected both lights on
already warm. the switch will be illuminated. When 3
LOW speed is selected one light will
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
be illuminated.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart- seats to operate.
ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
On models equipped with remote start, the drivers
in higher ambient temperatures.
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
below the climate controls. The fans operate at two Vehicle” for further information.
speeds, HIGH and LOW.
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or
rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found under the seat cushion at the front edge of each
seat. Pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or
backward to move the seat into the most comfortable
position, then release the handle to lock the seat into
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust 3
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped

The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position. To
adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back
on the seatback and release the handle at the desired Recline Handle
position. To return the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean forward and release the handle at the
desired position.

• Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat- • You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in
back to swing (dump) forward on manual recliner a seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with
seats. Do not stand or lean in front of the seat the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is
while actuating the handle. The seatback may no longer resting against your chest. If you ride in
swing forward and hit you causing injury. This this position, the shoulder harness will no longer
dump feature allows access to the storage bin be restraining you. In a collision you could slide
behind the seat. To avoid injury, place your hand under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal
on the seatback and actuate the handle then posi- injuries. Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is
tion the seatback in the desired position. parked.
(Continued) Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a 3
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large Adjusting Head Restraint
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints NOTE: The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab only) is
The outboard head restraints can be adjusted. To raise the fixed and cannot be adjusted.
head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
lower the head restraint, press the large button, located
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
the head restraint.
The back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage compartment (if
equipped).
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
side of the drivers seat cushion.
Adjustable Rear Head Restraints

NOTE: The power lumbar option is not programmable
with driver memory seats.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked 3
to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
Memory Seat Buttons button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall
the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror position, 1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
adjustable brake, accelerator pedals position and radio the ON/RUN position.
station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system 8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
to complete the memory recall before continuing to button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
Step 3. performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s
sideview mirror to the desired positions. 9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
4. Adjust the power adjustable pedals (if equipped) to
the desired positions. 10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set). 11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
remove the key.
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
driver’s door.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
selected.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and 3
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press remove the key.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
memory position 1.
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press before continuing to Step 3.
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
on the driver’s door.
memory position 2.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
button 1 on the driver’s door.
MEMORY buttons on the drivers seat during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, 5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To disable another RKE
transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter. approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. • The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ (8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
driving position when the key is placed into the
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
the ACC/ON position.
vehicle.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis-
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
available:
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is Exit/Entry.
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable 3
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
Hood Release
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
CAUTION!
and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release
it, before raising the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)

LIGHTS Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head- tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
light switch controls the operation of the headlights, scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and cleaning procedures must be followed.
fog lights (if equipped). 3
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch Location

Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
Automatic Headlight Position
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode. switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
Automatic Headlights Only) equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in 3
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are information.
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Under- lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
The fog lights are turned on by placing the headlight are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
rotary control in the parking light or headlight position An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
and pushing in the headlight rotary control. illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
Fog Light Switch
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter)
or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed 3
the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are
required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Cargo Light Lights-On Reminder
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
button. after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
Cargo Light Switch
lights will automatically turn off.
The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately
30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature. ON.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the 3
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever Turn Signal Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
steering column.
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
Turn Signals light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show defective.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the High/Low Beam
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range. 3
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Windshield Washers
WARNING!
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the could lead to a collision. You might not see other
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will windshield with the defroster before and during
operate for several seconds after the washer knob is windshield washer use.
released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while Mist Feature
in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
approximately three times after the wash knob is re- a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
leased. located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
time and automatically shut off.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
rating information can be found on most washer fluid pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
containers. windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering 3
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
Tilt Steering Lever

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
Adjustable Pedals Switch
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
from the driver to provide improved position with the REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
steering wheel. tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
the steering column. formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust- HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”. warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
CAUTION! steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically 3
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
warm.
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path. The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
WARNING! Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. will illuminate to indicate the steering
You could lose control and have an accident. Always wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
On models that are equipped with remote start, the wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
WARNING! (40 km/h).
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, right side of the steering wheel.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system 3
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut You could lose control and have an accident. Always
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
To Set A Desired Speed To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
button. is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed memory.
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
will be established. Control.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
WARNING!
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the 3
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
To Accelerate For Passing
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed. OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains The overhead console is located on the headliner above
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
moderate hills is normal. following features:
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol. 3
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON or
ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The
battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to
the battery, and can provide power at all times.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light and element must be used.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet — Floor Storage Bin
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following • Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
locations: — if equipped.
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack.
• Inside the top storage tray.
Power Outlet — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Crew Cab.
The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON or ACC positions.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or the vehicle.
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
with Console Front electric shock and failure.
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
CAUTION!
EQUIPPED
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if used to hold the ash receiver.
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will 3
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter (Bench Seat)
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
For vehicles equipped with a floor console the cuphold- To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
ers may be used. on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the Power Inverter Outlet
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
The power inverter switch is located • Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
on the switch bank below the Climate will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch WARNING!
a second time to turn the power outlet
To avoid serious injury or death:
off. 3
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
NOTE: • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will • Do not touch with wet hands.
be a delay of approximately one second before the • Close the lid when not in use.
power inverter status indicator turns on. The status • If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether shock and failure.
the inverter is producing AC power.
CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Storage Bin
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — (40–20–40
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders
Seats)
are located in the floor storage bin.
The cupholders are located in the pull-out tray on the
center stack of the instrument panel.
Cupholders
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab STORAGE
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage
located in the center armrest. The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel and features both an upper (if
equipped) and lower storage area.
3
Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box (If Equipped)
2 — Lower Glove Box
To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release
release. The glove box door will automatically open. the latch and lower the door.
Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box

Door Storage Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
passenger door trim panels.
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage

Front Door Storage
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
WARNING!
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment • This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
lower storage area. operation, or a collision. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about en-
dangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored
should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to

raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.
Center Storage Compartment
Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Drivers Side Seatback Storage
Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Storage Bin Crew Cab Storage

Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
CAUTION!
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com- Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
partment. the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Models)
Rear Window Defroster
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
The rear window defroster button is located on the
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the seats.
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Grocery Bag Hooks

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 3
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Rear Window Switch
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located A locking device in the center of the window helps to
on the overhead console. prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ EVIC Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 ▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center ▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/ 䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If (Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 241
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 241
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 223
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 246
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 230
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls — 4
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Window Fogging And Frosting . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Transfer Case Position Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Upper Switch Bank 10 — Cup Holders 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
1. Tachometer
The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per 3. Fuel Gauge
minute (RPM x 1000). Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
4. Temperature Gauge
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- 4
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
damage may occur. the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
2. Turn Signal Indicators
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
when the turn signal lever is operated.
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
rized dealership for service.
5. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
6. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater required and you may experience reduced performance,
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
wheels. may require towing.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
This light informs you of a problem with the cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
light will come on when the ignition is first Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a 4
8. 4WD Indicator
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the to receive torque from the engine simultane-
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the ously.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
9. SVC (Service) 4WD
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
The SVC 4WD light monitors the electric shift
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your four-wheel drive system. If the SVC 4WD light
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho- stays on or comes on during driving, it means
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is that the four-wheel drive system is not func-
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is tioning properly and that service is required.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- 12. Oil Pressure Gauge — If Equipped
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information. reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
10. TOW/HAUL
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack switch bank. This light will illumi- 13. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
11. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
14. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
Center (EVIC) Display Area
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed. Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. Regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading Vehicle Odometer Messages
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and messages will display in the odometer:
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is ESCOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Stability Control Off
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Cap Loose 4
the odometer must be reset at zero. HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil too Hot
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To LoCOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Engine Coolant
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Low
release the TRIP ODOMETER button. NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
running. To display the engine hours on the base cluster,
eter to be reset then push and hold the button for
perform the following: Place the ignition in the ON/
approximately two seconds until the display resets.
RUN, but do not start the engine. With the odometer
value displayed, hold the TRIP button down for a period
of six seconds. The odometer will change to trip value
first, then it will display the engine hour value. The
engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds cluster (Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter
until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started. (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information).
Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Area located in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Elec-
noFUSE
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
for further information.
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
gASCAP damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel eter display area. For further information on fuses and
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
loose gascap indicator or the message “gASCAP” will Vehicle”.
display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel
CHANgE OIL
filler cap properly and press the TRIP button to turn off
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
indicator system. The CHANgE OIL message will flash
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
A loose gas cap indicator will display in the Electronic 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for the premium the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate 15. Engine Temperature Warning Light
dependent upon your personal driving style. This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
ture gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine 4
is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
(do not start the engine).
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
times within 10 seconds. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information. cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
16. Shift Lever Indicator
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the 18. High Beam Indicator
automatic transmission. This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam. Push the multifunction lever forward to
NOTE: In vehicles with a 4.7L or 5.7L engine, the
switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
highest available transmission gear is displayed in the
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select 19. Voltmeter — If Equipped
(ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within
in “Starting And Operating” for further information. the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer
moves to either extreme left or right and remains there
17. Low Fuel Light
during normal driving, the electrical system should be
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
serviced.
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added. NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
cycling operation is controlled by the engine control master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
stabilize. System (ABS). In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
20. Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when 4
applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
felt during each stop.
button on the headlight switch.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
21. Brake Warning Light ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
the brake fluid level checked. proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING! The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
tion.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
22. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
system is required.
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. on during starting, have the condition investigated
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. promptly.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 4
23. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of soon as possible.
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control sys- CAUTION!
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
will come on when the ignition is first turned on and
damage to the engine control system. It also could
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain
required.
25. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
WARNING!
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced lights are on.
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
others.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
24. Air Bag Warning Light indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds not functioning and that service is required. However,
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first the conventional brake system will continue to operate
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
further information.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road operation). If this components and cause a fire.
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle 4
or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn-
light goes off. ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Informa-
CAUTION! tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further
information.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
28. Seat Belt Reminder Light briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the charging system light remains on, it means that the
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will rized dealer.
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
29. Charging System Light
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
instrument cluster.
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• Compass and Outside Temperature 4
• Audio Information
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Messages
• Customer Programmable Features (System Setup)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

• Trip Information (in Odometer line) Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub-
menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the UP button to scroll

upward through the main menus (DTE, mi/
gal, System Info, Messages, Units, Setup)
and sub-menus.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Trailer Brake Connected
Displays
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages: • Lights On
• Left front turn signal lamp out • Keyfob Battery Low
• Right front turn signal lamp out • Wrong Key
• Left rear turn signal lamp out • Damaged Key 4
• Right rear turn signal lamp out • Key not programmed
• Service air filter • Key In Ignition
• Perform service • Turn Signal On
• ESC Off • Oil Change Due > Dealer Info
• Coolant Low • System Setup Unavailable
• Check Trailer Brake Wiring • Warning Object Detected
• Service Trailer Brake System • System Setup Unavailable - Vehicle in Motion
• Service Four Wheel Drive System • Blind spot detection unavailable
• Adjustable pedals unavail. • Automatic High Beams on
• Cruise engaged • Automatic High Beams off
• Adjustable pedals unavail. Veh. in reverse • Service Keyless System
• Clean Park Assist sensors • Clearing channels
• Front Park Assist Not available - Blinded • Channels cleared
• Rear Park Assist Not available - Blinded • Channels defaulted
• Low Fuel • Channel X transmitting
• Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park • Channel X training
• Service blind spot system • Channel X trained
• Exhaust filter full – Power reduced See Dealer - • Did not train
Exhaust Filter 99% Full - - -
• Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• Blind spot system off
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar EVIC Warning Lights
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low • Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
• Remote start disabled — System fault
more doors may be ajar.
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Memory 1 Profile Set
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
• Memory 2 Profile Set This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The 4
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
• Memory System Unavailable — Not in Park
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
• Memory 1 Profile Recall vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
• Memory 2 Profile Recall
on.
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Veh in Reverse
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Cruise Engaged This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- This light informs you of a problem with the
ing system. The light should come on when the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly light will come on when the ignition is first
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
rized dealer.
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
• Electronic Speed Control Light
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
This light will turn on when the electronic
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
speed control is ON.
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light • SERV 4WD
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a comes on during driving, it means that the
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. 4WD system is not functioning properly and
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to that service is required.
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
Light — If Equipped 4
to cool.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and trol (ESC) is off.
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to • Transmission Temperature Light
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To mission fluid temperature that might occur
Do In Emergencies” for more information. with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle • Loose Gascap Message
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
light goes off. that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap icon will
CAUTION! display in the telltale display area. Tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se-
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
vere transmission damage or transmission failure.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
WARNING!
Oil Change Due
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, indicator system. The Oil Change Due message will
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
components and cause a fire. scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the Distance To Empty (DTE)
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
your personal driving style.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle 4
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the following steps.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
When the DTE value is less than 10 miles (16 km)
start the engine)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
within 10 seconds. continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
EVIC Average Fuel Economy The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read • Trip A
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
history information will be erased and the averaging will reset.
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Trip B
reset.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Trip Functions reset.
Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
• Elapsed Time
button until one of the following Trip Functions display
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
in the EVIC odometer line:
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
• Trip A time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
To Reset The Display • Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
displayed. Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP status indicator.
ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function
• Engine Hours
being displayed.
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units” 4
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
available information displays, then press SELECT to
be changed between English and Metric units of mea-
display any one of the following choices.
sure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
• Coolant Temp preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
Displays the actual coolant temperature. the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Compass / Temperature Display temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addi-
tion, on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera-
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
ture Control (ATC), it is suggested that the interior
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
cabin temperature be manually controlled should the
readings and the outside temperature.
system not perform as desired while in automatic
NOTE: mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC
• The system will display the last known outside tem- operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
perature when starting the vehicle and may need to be removed.
driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
Automatic Compass Calibration
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
readings are not updated when the vehicle is not
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
moving.
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
• During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
outside temperature display, the display may show 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem- metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
perature. The higher displayed temperature is due to EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
an environment free from large metallic objects such as calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, EVIC.
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
Manual Compass Calibration free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator indicator turns off. The compass will now function
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the normally.
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: 4
Compass Variance
1. Turn ON the ignition switch. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
then press the SELECT button.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is differences, and provide the most accurate compass
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
button. compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass then press the SELECT button.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
Compass Variance Map message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is fol-
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. lowed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
Setup displays in the EVIC. tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
following choices.
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Select Language deactivated.
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
Auto Unlock Doors
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when 4
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder-
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will dis-
play in the selected language.
deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn
Remote Unlock Sequence
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, next to the feature showing the system has been activated
you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors been deactivated.
1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st
seat features will automatically turn on when tempera-
Press” appears.
tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
RKE Linked To Memory above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, when remote start is activated. These features will stay on
pedals, and radio settings will return to the memory set through the duration of remote start or until the key is
position when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release
ter UNLOCK button is pressed. If this feature is not the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings the feature showing the system has been activated or the
can only return to the memory set position using the seat check-mark is removed showing the system has been
mounted switch. To make your selection, press and deactivated.
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
Horn With Remote Start Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
feature showing the system has been activated or the To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
check-mark is removed showing the system has been button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
deactivated. showing the system has been activated or the check-mark 4
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will Headlamp Off Delay
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap- up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
pears next to the feature showing the system has been then press and release the SELECT button until a check-
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
system has been deactivated. has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
in reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid
showing the system has been deactivated.
objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped make your selection, press and release the SELECT
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Key-Off Power Delay
feature showing the system has been activated or the
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
deactivated.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes Trailer Brake Type
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your be changed between “Light Electric” and “Heavy Elec-
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is tric”. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
that the setting has been selected. the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
Refer to “Integrated Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting 4
And Operating.”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors Calibrate Compass
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
Compass Variance
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/ MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side side of the radio faceplate.
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Media Center 130 (RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio. 4
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to save time change. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
exit setting tone, balance, and fade. repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
AM/FM Button
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
Memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
When you are receiving a station that you wish to pressing the pushbutton twice. 4
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
button number will display.
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button Buttons 1 - 6
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
will not be stored into pushbutton memory. stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
MP3 Audio Play ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), CAUTION!
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CD player mechanism.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD away and jam the player mechanism.
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than loaded.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button 4
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
CD and MP3 modes. domly selected track.
TIME Button Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after MPEG Sampling
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times. MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 160, 128, 144,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64, 4
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or supported.
VBR bit rate.
Playback of MP3 Files Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
time to start playing the MP3 files. audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following: Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. 4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
another selection. Holding either button will bypass (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
stations without stopping until you release it. standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures Of Your Vehicle”. Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped TIME Button
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- and radio frequency.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
screen. SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
will begin to blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
knob to save time change. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either 4
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
procedure, starting at Step 2. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second MUSIC TYPE Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
mid-range tones. or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the No program type or
None
sound level from the right or left side speakers. undefined
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Classical Classicl
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between Classic Rock Cls Rock
the front and rear speakers. College College
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to Country Country
exit setting tone, balance, and fade. Foreign Language Language
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform Top 40 Top 40
Jazz Jazz Weather Weather
News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
Nostalgia Nostalga is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Oldies Oldies station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Personality Persnlty Music Type function only operates when in the FM 4
Public Public mode.
Rhythm and Blues R&B If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Religious Music Rel Musc (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Religious Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Rock Rock SETUP Button
Soft Soft Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
Soft Rock Soft Rck the following items:
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
Sports Sports you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
Talk Talk TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
to save time change. SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Memory
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND Buttons 1 - 6
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
station and press and release that button. If a button is stations).
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
DISC/AUX Button
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
be stored into pushbutton memory.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
MP3 Audio Play ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), CAUTION!
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs 4
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CD player mechanism.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD away and jam the player mechanism.
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than loaded.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
CD and MP3 modes. domly selected track.
TIME Button Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
Press this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this 4
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after MPEG Sampling
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times. MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 160, 128, 144,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or supported.
VBR bit rates.
Playback of MP3 Files LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3 files. folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files). 4
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
ignition is OFF).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s Equipped
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
vehicle speakers. ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down. System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel- using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
come kit that contains general information, including selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID) CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio 4
Please have the following information available when mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID). roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ESN/SID Access
on or above the antenna.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
Reception Quality SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons: channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes. SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception. the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
(Satellite) Mode tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio. additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the channel with the same selected Music Type name.
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
TUNE Control (Rotary) (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
SETUP Button 4
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type following items:
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
lected.
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
and press and release that button. If a button is not Equipped)
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Features Of Your Vehicle”.
stored into pushbutton memory.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
twice. an option with these radios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
button number will display. plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability. 4
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device. USB Connector Port
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
where the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
located in the glove compartment.
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable Using This Feature
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
lid to close without damaging the cable. USB port:
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), etc.) information on the radio display.
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
pressing radio switches, as described below.
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
audio device)
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
Play Mode
the current track.
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio holding the FF >> button.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will 4
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or seconds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the during play mode will jump to the next track in the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙. list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙ the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press ⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio List Or Browse Mode
device mode to repeat the current playing track or During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
Off⬙. scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
ous and next tracks.
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): press the TUNE control knob to select and start
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the radio display may be noticeable. the second line.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward mode.
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top 4
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
external USB device. selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 1 – Playlists
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
• Preset 2 – Artists track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 4 – Genres
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks audio device.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
CAUTION!
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any Uconnect™ phone system.
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
er’s guidelines.
Streaming Audio”.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device Play Mode
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
and/or to the connectors. start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
WARNING! phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning and played.
could result in an accident. Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙. EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
access the switches.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track 4
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a The button located in the center of the left hand control
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player
The button located in the center of the right hand control Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
source. will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
after the current track begins to play.
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode. The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
Radio Operation
does not function for all other radios.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions: coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
4
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
instrument panel below the radio. be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera-
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem-
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor-
mal when the snowplow is removed.
1 – Front Blower 4 – DEFROST Mode
2 – Temperature Control 5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
3 – MODE Control 6 – RECIRCULATION Control
Front Blower Control temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red
There are four blower speeds. Use this area, indicates warmer temperatures.
control to regulate the amount of air
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
forced through the system in any
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
mode you select. The blower speed
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
increases as you move the control
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
clockwise from the OFF position.
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the 4
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
Temperature Control
from several patterns of air distribu-
Use this control to regulate the tem-
tion. You can select either a primary
perature of the air inside the passenger
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
a blend of two of these modes. The
terclockwise, from top center into the
closer the control is to a particular
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
Bi-Level Mode
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Defrost Mode

conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the Air is directed through the windshield and side
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
comfort during sunny but cool conditions. for best windshield and side window defrosting.
Floor Mode NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
small amount through the defrost and side window A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
demist outlets. help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control • In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
Press this button to choose between mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
outside air intake or recirculation of of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
the air inside the vehicle. A LED will defogging, select the outside air position.
illuminate when you are in Recircula-
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
tion mode. Only use the Recirculation
ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
mode to temporarily block out any
button.
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to 4
cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot Air Outlets
or humid weather. The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
NOTE:
airflow.
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed. seat passengers.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Economy Mode MAX A/C
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to For maximum cooling, when MAX
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. A/C is selected the A/C is turned on
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired automatically and the air is recircu-
temperature. lated.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illu-
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
minate when the A/C system is
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
engaged.
button is pushed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using rotary
knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature
setting by using the temperature up and down but-
tons.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
4
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the temperature controls, the pas-
senger side temperature becomes the same as the
temperature selected by the driver. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior 1 - Blower Control 9 - DEFROST
comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers. 2 - Left Temperature Up 10 - Right Temperature Down
3 - SYNC Indicator 11 - A/C
4 - Left Temperature Indicator 12 - A/C Indicator
5 - Right Temperature Indicator 13 - SYNC Temperature Button
6 - DELAY Indicator 14 - Left Temperature Down
7 - Right Temperature Up 15 - RECIRCULATE
8 - MODE
Automatic Operation NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
1. Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
2. Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi- comfort as quickly as possible.
tion on the ATC Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
3. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
passenger temperature buttons. Once the desired tem- Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and auto- (SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
matically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
4. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to display until the engine warms up. The blower will
function automatically. increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and
DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
selected, or by adjusting the blower control knob and adjusting the blower control knob. The fan will now
setting the fan to any fixed speed. operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
Manual Operation
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
This system offers a full complement of manual override
Auto mode.
features.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
by selecting one of the following positions. 4
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati- Panel Mode
cally. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
There are six fixed blower speeds. Use
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
this control to regulate the amount of
and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off
air forced through the system in any
the airflow from these outlets.
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control Bi-Level Mode
clockwise from the OFF position. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
Blower Control outlets and defrost outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
air is directed through the defrost and side window operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
demister outlets. conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the
ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows
Mix Mode
through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
display and deactivate the A/C system.
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear. NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix, Bi-Level or Defrost Mode, the
Defrost Mode
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
Air comes from the windshield and side window
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
side window defrosting. select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control Summer Operation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
you may wish to recirculate interior air by to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button. against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. 4
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
Winter Operation
allow outside air into the vehicle.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation. Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
modes are selected. during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage Outside Air Intake
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
of compressor damage when the system is started again. is clear of ice, slush and snow.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Operating Tips
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 278
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 5
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 288
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ▫ Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Transfer Case Position Indicator Light . . . . . . 291
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . 292
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . 307
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 325 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 336
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 5
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 348 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
STARTING PROCEDURES Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt. obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING! Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any 5
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
driving range.
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A pressed to shift out of PARK.
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Tip Start Feature
CAUTION!
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
motor will continue to run but will automatically disen- engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
gage when the engine is running. 15 seconds before trying again.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of WARNING!
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
If Engine Fails To Start start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the causing serious personal injury.
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
(Continued)
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster crease as the engine warms up.
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen- quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
cies” for further information. standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
3500 Models — 5.7L Engine Only 5
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
by the right front tow hook.
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
running smoothly. strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
the c-clip.
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
CAUTION! (Continued)
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
WARNING! vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
electrical cord could cause electrocution. speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK 5
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
unattended children inside a vehicle. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
(Continued) forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- column. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK. shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. hundred miles (kilometers).
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down- lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select parking brake.
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
(ERS)” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches on
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
Gear Ranges grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or 5
NEUTRAL into another gear range. WARNING!
PARK • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the the parking brake. Always apply the parking
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. movement and possible injury or damage.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
(Continued)
range.
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
move the shift lever clockwise without first pull- you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
ing it toward you after you have placed it in PARK. running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
leaving the vehicle. and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly unattended children inside a vehicle.
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
into gear when the engine is idling normally and number of reasons. A child or others could be
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
(Continued) fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
CAUTION!
it indicates the PARK position.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
will not move out of PARK.
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift REVERSE
lever could result. This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as NEUTRAL
this can damage the drivetrain. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged 5
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
DRIVE
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
or road conditions. You might lose control of the and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and
vehicle and have a collision. sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION! When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre- Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and (ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
Emergencies” for further information. performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the be modified depending on engine and transmission
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
the transmission cools down.
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and 5
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
Transmission Limp Home Mode
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
excess heat generation.
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
aging the transmission. earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps: If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
5. Restart the engine. never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
operation. vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the ERS (+)
the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top switch until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+) position indicator in the instrument cluster.
will change the top available gear.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
5
Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
Allowed
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
Column Shift Lever ERS (-) switch down. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
The automatic transmission includes an electronically the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The trans- to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
the following conditions are present: mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an ad-
equate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/ TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode ally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time Because sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is higher when the torque converter clutch is not en-
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine gaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
is started. shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the trans-
Torque Converter Clutch
mission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the 5
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
different feeling or response during normal operation in mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
NOTE:
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
engine.
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
EQUIPPED positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H
transfer case, located in this section for further informa- and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
tion. surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
damage to the driveline components.
The transfer case provides four mode positions.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
• Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
• Four-wheel drive high range (4H) in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-
shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
• Neutral (N)
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
• Four-wheel drive low range (4L) position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). tures.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
WARNING!
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and You or others could be injured if you leave the
can cause damage to the drivetrain. vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
5
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
brake should always be applied when the driver is
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
not in the vehicle.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4L
transfer case mode position, see the information below: Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
2H
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
4H
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
Case
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional 2H ⇔ 4H
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
N
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
information.
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L • Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
transfer case NEUTRAL. method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
NOTE:
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
5 km/h).
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while • Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the 5
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission is in gear.
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped mode positions:
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel. • Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position) accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for spe- Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
cific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in- select a different transfer case position, the indicator
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo- lights will do the following:
nents.
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the 5
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing transfer case completes the shift.
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
Operating” for further information.
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
WARNING!
tinue to flash.
Always engage the parking brake when powering
3. The transfer case will not shift.
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn injury.
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require- NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ in this section for front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
further information. damage to driveline components.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function- not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
ing properly and that service is required. (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends For additional information on the appropriate use of each
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each transfer case mode position, see the information below:
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
2WD
drivetrain.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
4WD LOCK
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
WARNING!
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides 5
You or others could be injured if you leave the additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
not in the vehicle.
N • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear position have been met, the current position indicator
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
Towing” in Starting and Operating” for further When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
information. for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
Shifting Procedure
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
NOTE:
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be com-
original position, make certain all shift requirements
pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
switch to the desired position.
selected position indicator light will flash and the origi-
nal position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
the shift.
Alternate Procedure
2WD or 4WD LOCK⇔ 4WD LOW
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the 5
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
NEUTRAL.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
position.
either of the following procedures:
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
Preferred Procedure
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
NOTE: surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction.
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
continuously while the original position indicator light
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights momentary application of the parking brake may be
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON necessary to gain maximum traction.
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing. WARNING!
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
there is a difference between the traction characteristics of wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During control of the vehicle.
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
WARNING!
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
turn. wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
Acceleration (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull Traction 5
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
when there is a difference in the surface traction under wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
the rear (driving) wheels. surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
stop. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
DRIVING THROUGH WATER warning may result in injuries that are serious or
Driving through water more than a few inches/ fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water • Driving through standing water may cause dam-
before driving through it. Never drive through age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in after driving through standing water. Do not con-
the way before driving through the standing wa- tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam- 5
ter.
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
effects.
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
(Continued) internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. steering capability if power assist is lost.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop- still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. parking maneuvers.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you NOTE:
stranded. • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your there is a problem with the power steering system.
passengers, and others around you. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
does not in any way damage the steering system. apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
WARNING! rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering CAUTION!
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
CAUTION!
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
WARNING!
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
occur. with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied, the engine is off and the key fob is
removed from the ignition switch. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
Parking Brake Release
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release cluster will illuminate.
handle.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking number of reasons. A child or others could be
brake before attempting to move the vehicle. seriously or fatally injured.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- • Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A child
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application. could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged 5
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped failure and a collision.
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
The parking brake should always be applied whenever REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the driver is not in the vehicle. the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
CAUTION!
braking capability, the remaining system will still func-
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica-
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an tion, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
authorized dealer immediately. activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle. conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
WARNING! makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System contains
sophisticated electronic equipment. It may be sus- The ABS conducts a low-speed selftest at about 10 mph
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in- (16 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment. while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
braking capability. Installation of such equipment and snow. This is normal.
should be performed by qualified professionals.
5
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is de-
the vehicle comes to a complete stop. This is the result of
signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
the system reverting to the base brake system and is
under adverse braking conditions. The system operates
normal.
with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure
to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
slippery surfaces. pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light
The ABS includes an amber warning light. When the light
is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
reverts to standard, non-anti-lock brakes. those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
WARNING! planing.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just or the safety of others.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire Markings
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 5
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load
Standards Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
Temperature Grades rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits) 5
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold 5
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location

This placard tells you important information about axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
the: GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle “Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2) total weight your vehicle can carry To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
3) tire size designed for your vehicle vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here. 5
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. • The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
[295 kg]). occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to door.
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
Economy ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual. 5
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent the winter.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
which could damage the valve stem.
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire Inflation Pressure – 4500/5500 With Steel Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Mounted To
Carcass Ply Tires Vehicle
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewall. As During procedures when adding tire inflation pressure,
such, they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. the technician or individual must utilize a remote infla-
Adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel tion device, and ensure that all persons are clear of the
trained, supervised and equipped accordingly. trajectory area.
5
4500/5500 Tire Inflation

When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
assembly mounted on a vehicle, use a Remote Mount The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
Automatic Inflation Kit or see your authorized dealer. within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
NOTE: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire and wheel
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
assembly which has been run flat or is extremely under-
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
assembly for inspection.
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
Personnel trained, supervised, and equipped according dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administra- and cold tire inflation pressures. 5
tion (OSHA) should perform this work.
WARNING!
Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Not Mounted to
Vehicle High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
assembly not mounted on a vehicle, use a Remote Mount tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Automatic Inflation Kit and a Tire Inflation Cage or see serious collision resulting in serious injury or death.
your authorized dealer. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
WARNING! Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
poorly. The instability could cause a collision result-
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
ing in serious injury or death. Always use radial ply
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
tires in sets of four (or six, in case of trucks with dual
pattern.
rear wheels). Never combine them with other types
of tires. If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
CAUTION!
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING! 5
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
80D18 103M. indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn WARNING!
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the result in loss of vehicle control.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) to help you in determining when your tires should be
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without replaced.
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the 1 — Worn Tire
speed. 2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
WARNING!
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
point.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
factors including, but not limited to: exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
Information section of this manual for more information of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
sion components. You could lose control and have 5
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
those of the original wheels.
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
It is recommended you contact your original equipment approved for your vehicle.
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
(Continued)
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
capacity, other than what was originally equipped gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
index could result in tire overloading and failure. will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
You could lose control and have a collision result-
ing in serious injury or death. TIRE CHAINS
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Use “Class U” chains or other traction aids that meet SAE
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire Type “U” specifications.
failure and loss of vehicle control resulting in
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- observe the following precautions:
ings. (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• Because of limited chain clearance between tires • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
and other suspension components, it is important on method of installation, operating speed, and
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro- conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could if different than the speed recommended by the
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged manufacturer.
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
5
retighten after driving about 1/2 mi (0.8 km). ing link and cable (radial) chains.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h). Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large 4X2 trucks.
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 NOTE:
vehicles. • The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the front
and rear of 4X4 vehicles, trucks with dual rear wheels
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
and LT235/80R17 tires.
ment.
(Continued)
• On 4X2 vehicles, class “U” snow chains are permitted SNOW TIRES
on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/80R17 size during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
tires. M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
• On 4X4 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) vehicles, class “U” If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only on type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
vehicles equipped with LT265/70R17. in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
SRW (Single Rear Wheels) equipped with LT245/ not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
70R17, LT265/70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of vehicles (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
equipped with LT265/70R17 tires. There may not be original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
structural or body damage to your vehicle. tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
checked before using these tire types. formed.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at 5
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Tire Rotation
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
side to side at the recommended intervals.
CAUTION!
Dual Rear Wheels
4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off
road tire.
(Continued)
Tire Rotation
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to over regular gasoline in these engines.
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
on the vehicle. For example, if the spare is used to high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re- required.
mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these 5
tires will maintain proper position. symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
tory fuel economy and performance when
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline” Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E-85
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and drivability problems and may damage critical
prove air quality. fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
lines. Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
E-85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components.
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Methanol.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: exposure to E-85 fuel.
• operate in a lean mode MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• poor engine performance blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor cold start and cold drivability
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline 5
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
• change the engine oil and oil filter
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
engine controller memory allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There- overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
Fuel System Cautions service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
CAUTION! • When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully-
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
performance: temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock per-
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- sists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
mance, damage the emission control system. may result.
(Continued) (Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING!
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentra- Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
performance problems resulting from the use of monoxide poisoning:
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
the manufacturer. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
5
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period. If the
against you. vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
ADDING FUEL
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper CAUTION!
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor- • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, system could result from using an improper fuel
drive with all side windows fully open. tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a
poorly-fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL
(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the

fuel tank is full.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
tank is being filled. could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is ground while filling.
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
turn on. If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly 5
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap 1/4 turn until you hear one installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
tightened. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
Indicator Light will come on, Be sure the gas cap is the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Payload
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
(VIN).
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. cle’s GVWR.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
Tire Size Loading
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
capacity of this tire size. by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
listed. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Inflation Pressure
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front 5
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
Curb Weight within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
the brakes operate. hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
CAUTION!
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR you in understanding the following information:
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
your vehicle.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
TRAILER TOWING further information.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
review this information to tow your load as efficiently cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
and safely as possible. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
WARNING!
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale. It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) Tongue Weight (TW)
allowance for the presence of a driver. The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less 5
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric- safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
requirements.
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
WARNING!
sized trailers.
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
performance and could result in a collision.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the • Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent reational Vehicle dealer for additional
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing information.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle Standards
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Gooseneck Hitch Duty
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted Heavy Duty
over the rear axle in the truck bed. 5
Fifth Wheel/ Greater than 10,000 lbs
Trailer Hitch Classification Gooseneck (4540 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
CHASSIS CAB 3500
ST/SLT/Laramie
5.7L HEMI威 V8 5-Speed Automatic Transmission Towing: 10,850 lbs (4921 kg) - max
Payload: 6,520 lbs (2957 kg) - max
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Manual Towing: 18,750 lbs (8505 kg) - max
Transmission Payload: 5,910 lbs (2681 kg) - max
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Automatic Towing: 18,700 lbs (8482 kg) - max
CHASSIS CAB 4500

ST/SLT/Laramie
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed AISIN Au- Towing: 18,300 lbs (8301 kg) - max
tomatic Transmission Payload: 8,830 lbs (4005 kg) - max
CHASSIS CAB 5500
ST/SLT/Laramie
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed AISIN Towing: 18,250 lbs (8278 kg) - max
Automatic Transmission Payload: 11,770 lbs (5339 kg) - max
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi- Trailer And Tongue Weight
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
addresses: the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW 5
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
• http://www.ramtrucks.com.
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
• http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada). severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
your trailer hitch. put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for fur-
ther information.
Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom- Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
mended: guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
CAUTION! • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 5
have a collision.
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
This helps the engine and other parts of the overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your 2. GTW
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 3. GAWR
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the 4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
slack for turning corners. always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission Towing Requirements – Tires
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer with less than the full
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
size spare tire.
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ratings are not exceeded: ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
1. GVWR • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
(Continued) sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General required when towing a trailer with electronically
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
proper inspection procedure. a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
GVWR and GAWR limits.
CAUTION! 5
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
personal injury.
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified
WARNING!
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau-
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s lic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake compatible with ITBM.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped

Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-
ule (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes. 1 — GAIN/Brake Output Power Display
2 — Manual Brake Control Lever
3 — Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
4 — GAIN Adjustment Buttons
The user interface consists of the following: lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
GAIN/ Brake Output Power Display
the trailer brakes.
Shows the current GAIN setting.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
This display may also be used to display diagnostic
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
information, if needed.
applied.
• SC — Short Circuit to Ground
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
• Sb — Short to Battery This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
• CF — Controller Fault – If this message appears on the If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is 5
display, see your authorized dealer. turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
When the vehicle brakes are applied, the display will no
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
trailer brakes.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Manual Brake Control Lever
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
Indicator Light” will flash.
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control condition, functioning normally, and properly adjusted.
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The See your trailer dealer if necessary.
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
GAIN
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
EVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM,
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be
and weather.
selected from the EVIC options.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel 5. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or
until System Setup appears on the screen. DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the
screen.
5
6. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
appears on the screen. squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
7. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
GAIN setting of 5 is a good starting point.
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the with air trailer brake systems and other systems not
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss compatible with ITBM. To determine the type of
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop- brakes on your trailer and the availability of control-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result lers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
WARNING! modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed. 5
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop- Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
ping distance or trailer instability which could result stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
in personal injury. motoring safety.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear
WARNING!
range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or conditions will improve performance and extend trans-
wiring should be performed by a qualified automo- mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
tive technician. If done improperly it may cause up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
result in serious or fatal injury.
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
Towing Tips
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
traffic. before towing.
Automatic Transmission Tow/Haul
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. How- To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select ing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
“TOW/HAUL” mode or select a lower gear using the hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature. Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature) on more severe
grades.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped − Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed SNOWPLOW
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
you can get back to cruising speed. installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency. NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
Cooling System the recommendations contained within the current 5
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Dodge Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer,
heating, take the following actions: installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information.
− City Driving There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. overloading vehicle systems.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
WARNING!
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-
tioning properly.
scribed earlier in this manual
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
CAUTION!
www.dodge.com or refer to the current Dodge Body
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte- Builders Guide.
rior lamps are not properly installed. 1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
Before Plowing
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
GAWR should never be exceeded.
level.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
options or passengers, etc.
ness.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, ment following the recommendations provided by the
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross specific snowplow manufacturer.
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
Attached
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
opening.
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas- Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
sengers. completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The 5
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
and allow adequate passing clearance.
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow Operating Tips
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear. Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
parked.
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drive-
with outside temperature display, the display may show train damage, the following precautions should be ob-
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera- served.
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
• Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
4H.
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as • Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem- range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor- periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
mal when the snowplow is removed.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
General Maintenance returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
plow manufacturer’s instructions. the transmission.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive Models
Ground Models
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
5
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models 5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
will result.
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION!
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following improper towing is not covered under the New
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. • Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid
may leak from the transmission, causing damage
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in to internal parts.
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans- • Automatic transmissions must be placed in the
fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recre- PARK position for recreational towing.
ational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted • Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to
for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-
procedure for your vehicle. TRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
CAUTION! requirements can cause severe transmission and/or 5
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used Warranty.
when recreational towing. • Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the damage to internal parts.
transfer case. • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
(Continued)
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
CAUTION!
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
recreational towing. the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
WARNING! parts.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging 2. Turn OFF the engine.
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle 4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle. 6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with transmission in DRIVE. Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
10. Turn OFF the engine.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
11. Firmly apply the parking brake. normal usage.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
CAUTION!
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
do not start the engine. 5
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch. 6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
tow bar. (N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
gear clash.
15. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into PARK. Shifting Into NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift Transfer
Case (If Equipped)
8. Release the brake pedal.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. recreational towing:
10. Start the engine.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
12. Release the parking brake. vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
not in the vehicle.
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
CAUTION!
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that NEUTRAL is complete.
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
stays on, release the NEUTRAL button.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Shift automatic 8. Start the engine.
transmission into PARK.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure 5
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but that there is no vehicle movement.
do not start the engine.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
14. Shift the transmission into PARK.
(located by the selector switch). The NEUTRAL indicator
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
CAUTION!
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans- continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in If any of these requirements are not met prior to
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator light will
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK. flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
15. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
16. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
tow bar. lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE:
• A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
• The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL
shift requirements have not been met.
from the 4WD AUTO (if equipped) position.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift 8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
Transfer Case (If Equipped) transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for selector switch.
normal usage:
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
nected to the tow vehicle. clash.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but 10. Release the brake pedal.
do not start the engine. 5
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
(located by the selector switch) until the NEUTRAL
indicator light turns off. 15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
and must continue to be met until the shift has been switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
completed. If any of these requirements are not met not take place and no position indicator lights will be
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or are no on or flashing.
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator
• A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
that shift requirements have not been met.
met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ 3500 Models — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 393
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 6
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
䡵 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob . . . . . 396
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 ▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
upper switch bank just below the radio. WARNING!
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to operating the jack or changing the wheel.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
This is an emergency warning system and it should not vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for under a vehicle that is on a jack.
other motorists. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the take it to a service center where it can be raised on
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even a lift.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
(Continued)
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
3500 Models — If Equipped

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for
access. 6
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and Jack Location
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
slippery areas.
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera- WARNING!
tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
force, resulting in serious injury. vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
4500/5500 Models operating the jack or changing the wheel.
These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowl- 3. Set the parking brake.
edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
duty equipment, like a tire service company.
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission). On 4-Wheel
drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
wheel is being changed, block the left the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
rear wheel. the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle be raised.
when the vehicle is being jacked. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
Jacking Instructions
REVERSE.
Instructions • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a 6
jack.
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
vehicle: • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
careful of motor traffic. locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are Instructions for this vehicle.
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground. 1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
Jack Warning Label drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the
front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
6
Front Jacking Locations Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
extension tube. Securely place the jack under the sway adjust the jack position as required.
bar bracket (unless both tires are flat on one side, then
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
place jack under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle.
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench.
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the 6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface. using a crisscross pattern. The correct nut tightness is
135 ft lbs (183 N·m) torque for single rear wheel (SRW)
WARNING! models and 145 ft lbs (197 N·m) for dual rear wheel
models. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
or at a service station.
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire. WARNING!
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
of the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel (SRW) ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
models. On dual rear wheel models (DRW) the lug nuts in the places provided.
are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten
the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, 7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove
do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
lowered. center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap
damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack
CAUTION!
will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand,
it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to Use extreme caution when removing the front and
lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as rear center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap
previously described. and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recom-
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
mended to remove the caps.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts. For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the
end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off. Insert the
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
hub cap with a back and forth motion. 6
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed. replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
CAUTION! rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing Dual Rear Wheels
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
occur. nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
pry off notches. Make sure that the hook of the drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap washer.
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part
of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of
the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a
significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in
a front location. The correct direction of rotation for dual
tire installations must also be observed.
6
Oiling Location
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
Tightening Pattern (10 Studs)

Tightening Pattern (8 Studs) 1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a especially important during the first few hundred miles/
second time to verify that specific torque has been kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles become properly set. All nuts should first be firmly
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km). seated against the wheel. The nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the nuts to
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
circle, tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previ-
specifications at each lubrication interval.
ously tightened until final torque is achieved. Recom-
Wheel Nut Torque mended torques are shown in the following chart.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the 6
TorqueNewton-
Disc Wheels TypeNut StudSize Hex Size TorqueFt Lbs
Meters
Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 120-150 160-200
Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130-160 190-220
To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If Equipped pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
on stowing your spare tire (if equipped).
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
HOISTING follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking precautions.
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be CAUTION!
used on any other parts of the underbody. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
CAUTION! than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential alternator or electrical system may occur.
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result. WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Preparations For Jump-Start
WARNING!
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
moving fan blades.
positive battery post.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or 6
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
CAUTION!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
could establish a ground connection and personal
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
injury could result.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
Jump-Starting Procedure cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
WARNING!
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
plosion.
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
WARNING!
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION!
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
the reverse sequence: power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
6
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
rhythmically between DRIVE/1st and REVERSE while tween DRIVE/1st and REVERSE, do not spin the
applying slight pressure to the accelerator. wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
CAUTION! • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
lead to transmission overheating and failure. Al- wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
low the engine to idle with the shift lever in transmission shifting occurring).
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize over-
heating and reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- • Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could or death.
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi- • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- ing serious injury.
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a 6
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
hooks. tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the Shift Lever Override Access Port
override tab through the access port (ringed circle) on the
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
bottom of the steering column.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the
transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Wheels OFF
Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
the Ground
See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
ing” under “Starting and Operating”
If transmission is operable: • Auto Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE • Transmission in NEUTRAL • Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
• 30 mph max(48 km/h) Neutral)
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL 6
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or Dolly Front NOT ALLOWED
Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip- Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to towing.
vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
position, not the ACC position.
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc- sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. 15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
front wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 6
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the • Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
the opposite end on a towing dolly. case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the • Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is case. Such damage is not covered by the New
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT Vehicle Limited Warranty.
in Neutral, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – Four-Wheel
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 7
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 ▫ Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And
Turn Signal – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 ▫ Fog Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped . . . . 447
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 450
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 435 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
soon as possible. installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
the vehicle is started. serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start 7
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.
available which include detailed service information for
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
attempting any procedure yourself.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
WARNING! form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- 7
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a dealership or qualified repair center.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- (Continued)
chanic.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
that protect the performance and durability of dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these top of the safe zone on these engines.
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi- CAUTION!
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
because of component malfunction, use only the oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
specified fluid for the flushing procedure. your engine.
Engine Oil Change Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. tion.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
CAUTION!
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
Engine Oil Selection
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
Identification Symbol cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
This symbol means that the oil has your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
been certified by the American location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Petroleum Institute (API). The Your Vehicle” for further information. 7
manufacturer only recommends
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
API Certified engine oils.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils station or governmental agency for advice on how and
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
quality requirements are met and the recommended your area.
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
Engine Oil Filter
followed.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
Materials Added To Engine Oil at every engine oil change.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
Engine Oil Filter Selection
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
performance may be impaired by supplemental
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-
additives.
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary WARNING!
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
near the engine compartment before starting the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
serious personal injury.
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In 7
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
Emergencies” for further information.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air (Continued)
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use battery that the positive cable is attached to the
a booster battery or any other booster source with positive post and the negative cable is attached to
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
clamps to touch each other. tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands terminal posts and free of corrosion.
after handling. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
CAUTION! Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book, lo-
cated on the DVD, for further warranty informa-
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
tion.
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 7
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Body Lubrication
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
sor Oil, or Refrigerants. seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi-
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
equipment.
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – Four-Wheel Drive When performing other underhood services, the hood
Models latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil cleaned and lubricated.
change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR威 Type MS-
6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威 performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
lock cylinder. present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
Windshield Wiper Blades
function.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a Adding Washer Fluid
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
tions of salt or road film. be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
diator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
7
from a dry windshield.
blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This Exhaust System
rating information can be found on most washer fluid The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
containers. the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
WARNING! or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
must be exercised when filling or working around
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
the washer solution.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
information. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
over materials that can burn. Such materials might involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, 7
contact anything that can burn. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Cooling System Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
WARNING! at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
is hot. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Engine Coolant Checks bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill 7
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
Selection Of Coolant coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool- tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu- may not be compatible with the engine coolant
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
information. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
CAUTION! freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro- Adding Coolant
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace-
possible. ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(Continued) coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
equivalent. will require more frequent coolant changes.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant Cooling System Pressure Cap
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
anticipated. (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
7
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
WARNING!
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- with your local authorities to determine the disposal
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
pressure cap while the system is hot or under any ground spills immediately.
pressure.
Checking Coolant Level – 5.7L Engine
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on
gine damage may result. the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir 3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
neck.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
7
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
a month.
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. freezing.
Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
enter the radiator. your engine, which contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
WARNING!
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
braking capacity in an emergency.
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake when performing under the hood service or immediately
system components should be inspected periodically. if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper failure. 7
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
WARNING!
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
should be conducted. fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
can severely damage your brake system and/or
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. failure. This could result in a collision.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in Rear
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake Axles, refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
failure. This could result in a collision. “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. For
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not re-
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing quired. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons,
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be 7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be inspected.
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. When checking the fluid level (4500/5500 only), the
(Continued) vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level
should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the
fill hole on the front axle. The fluid level should be level Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
with the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle. maintenance intervals.
Drain And Refill Lubricant Selection
On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to drain Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
the axle fluid. “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE: Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evi-
dent while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be
considered normal operation of the limited slip
1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug
differential.
Transfer Case Automatic Transmission
Drain And Refill Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
maintenance intervals. transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
Lubricant Selection
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
Fluid Level Check tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler fluid.
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position. CAUTION!
• Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission 7
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu- fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio- normal operating temperature. Operation of the trans-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu- Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur- Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
ther information. operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
Special Additives temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered tween the fingertips.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- the following procedure must be used:
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as temperature.
they may adversely affect seals.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
pedal.
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi- perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
tion ending with the lever in PARK. room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
seated.
normal operating temperature.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT” CAUTION!
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add 7
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
produce an accurate reading.
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
dipstick tube.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
maintenance intervals. road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
body protection.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
information.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Stone and gravel impact. scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
finish.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
Washing
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
such as steel wool or scouring powder which will
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
lent, or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels
completely with clear water. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi 7
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu- paint and decals.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Special Care • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
open. scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
the owner.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
CAUTION!
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These remove soap residue.
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
tective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
residue.
equivalent is recommended.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If protectants on Stain Repel products.
Equipped
Interior Care
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
ner:
upholstery and carpeting.
7
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
with a clean, dry towel.
upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Cleaning Headlights
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. stone breakage than glass headlights.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
WARNING!
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Seat Belt Maintenance
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror, wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are FUSES
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Totally Integrated Power Module
7
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive tains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on Cavity Cartridge Mini Description
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Fuse Fuse
J01 40 Amp Trailer Tow
Green
J02 30 Amp Electric Brake
Pink
J03 30 Amp Diesel Powertrain
Pink Control Module – If
Equipped
J04 25 Amp Driver Door Node
Natural
J05 25 Amp Passenger Door Node
Natural
J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes
Totally Integrated Power Module Green Pump/Stability
Control System
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes J17 40 Amp Starter Motor Sole-
Pink Valve/Stability Con- Green noid
trol System J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control
J08 40 Amp Power Seat Blue Module Transmission
Green Range
J10 30 Amp Sway Bar Module – If J19 60 Amp Rad Fan Motor HI/
Pink Equipped Yellow Rad Fan Motor Low
J11 30 Amp Transfer Case Module J20 30 Amp Front Wiper Ground/
Pink Pink Low/High
J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster J21 20 Amp Washer Control
Pink Blue
J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Off J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module
7
Yellow Draw (IOD) Fuse Natural
J14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Lamps/ M1 15 Amp Stop Switch Lamp
Blue Park Lamps Blue
J15 40 Amp Front Blower M5 25 Amp 115V AC Inverter
Green Natural

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M6 20 Amp Power Outlet (Instru- M12 30 Amp Radio/Amplifier
Yellow ment Panel or Front Green
Console)/Rain Snsr M13 20 Amp Main #2 Instrument
M7 20 Amp Power Outlet (Rear Yellow Cluster/Wireless Con-
Yellow Console or Center trol Module/ITM/
Seat) Siren/Multifunction
M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat & Switch (Steering Col-
Yellow Steering Wheel umn Module)
M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats M14 20 Amp Back Up Camera
Yellow Yellow (Domestic Only)
M10 15 Amp Hands Free Module/ M15 20 Amp Power Seat
Blue Vanity Lamp/ Yellow Module(s)/Audio
Universal Garage Telematics/Daytime
Door Opener Module Running Lights
M11 10 Amp Climate Control Sys- Relay/Instrument
Red tem Cluster/Transfer Case
Module

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M16 10 Amp Airbag Module M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor/
Red Yellow Diesel Lift Pump – If
M18 15 Amp Center Stop Lamp Equipped
Blue M26 10 Amp Driver’s Door Switch
M19 25 Amp Automatic Shutdown Red
Natural 1 and 2 M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch
M20 15 Amp Instrument Cluster Red
Blue Interior Lighting /Sw M28 15 Amp Powertrain Control
Steering Wheel/Sw Blue Module
Bank M29 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor
M21 20 Amp Automatic Shutdown Red
Yellow 3 M30 15 Amp J1962 Diag Connector
7
M22 10 Amp Horns (Low/High) – Blue
Red Right M31 20 Amp Back-Up Lamps
M23 10 Amp Horns (Low/High) – Yellow
Red Left M32 10 Amp Airbag Module
Red

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M33 10 Amp Powertrain Control M37 10 Amp Antilock Brakes/
Red Module Red Stability Control Sys-
M34 10 Amp Park Assist Module/ tem Module/
Red Climate Control Sys- Stoplamp Switch
tem Module/IR M38 25 Amp All Door Lock &Un-
Sensor/Compass Natural lock
Module
M35 15 Amp Left Front & Rear CAUTION!
Blue Parklamps
• When installing the totally integrated power mod-
M36 20 Amp Power Outlet (Instru- ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
Yellow ment Panel or Center
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
Console)
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
(Continued)
• As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
may result in a dangerous electrical system over- air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
corrected. possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
VEHICLE STORAGE NOTE:
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we • When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully
recommend that you take the following steps to mini- seated; the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery: full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the 7
RUN position. This is a normal condition.
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse located in
the Integrated Power Module, located in the engine • When the vehicle is shipped from the factory, the IOD
compartment. The IOD cavity includes a snap-in re- fuse is in the up or extracted position. If the radio,
tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without interior lamps, keyless entry or other features do not
removing it from the fuse block. work with the key OFF, check the position of the fuse
(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 921
instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis- Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
play ⬙NO FUSE.” Dual Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Quad Headlamp – Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
REPLACEMENT BULBS Quad Headlamp – High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Dual Headlamp) . . . . . 3157K
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No. Front Turn Signal Lamp (Quad Headlamp) . . . 3157NA
Overhead Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2 Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679 Cab Roof Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And Turn
Signal – If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle. 7
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
screws.
access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house 10. Disconnect electrical connectors.
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp

bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard bulb has been replaced.
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen-
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
Fog Lamps – If Equipped Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
the back of the front fog lamp housing. 1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it 7
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir- 3. Turn the desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove the
ing harness to the body. socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped
CAUTION!
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps

• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
7
2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the lamp 3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
assembly.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
5.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 18.7 Quarts 17.7 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter – 5.7L Engine MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
(5.7L Engine Only) ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (MS-9763) or equivalent.
(4500/5500)
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
N
CONTENTS A
N
C
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 456 E
▫ 5.7L Gas Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
N in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
T 5.7L Gas Engine
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
E The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
N manual must be done at the times or mileages specified Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
A
N to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
C vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main- vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
E tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
C driving. Inspection and service should also be done influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
H anytime a malfunction is suspected. Depending on operating conditions, the message may
E
D appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
U Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
L indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
the next 500 miles (805 km).
E remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
S scheduled maintenance.
8
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 455 M
A
NOTE: referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle I
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in N
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In- T
E
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom- N
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for A
illuminated. further information. N
C
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel E
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. S
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
C
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while H
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which- the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- E
ever comes first. racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the D
U
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. L
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
E
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if S
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other required. 8
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
A
I Once A Month At Each Oil Change
N
T • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
E damage.
N • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
N as required. CAUTION!
C
E • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S master cylinder, power steering and transmission and may result in damage to the vehicle.
C add as needed.
H Required Maintenance Intervals
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
operation.
U pages for the required maintenance intervals.
L
E
S
8
A
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or 16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service I
N
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule T
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before N
filter. 16,000 miles (26 000 km). A
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the N
irregular wear, even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. C
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only). E
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
S
only). ❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
C
12 months. H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
8
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center Signature, Authorized Service Center

A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or 32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
N
T 18 Months Maintenance Schedule
E Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
A filter. 32,000 miles (52 000 km).
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C irregular wear, even if it occurs before ❏ Replace the spark plugs.
E ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
only). ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
C
H ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
D ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
U change if using your vehicle for police,
L taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
E towing.
S
8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

A
N
30 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
filter. 48,000 miles (78 000 km). A
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
S
only). ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. H
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, U
off-road or frequent trailer towing. L
E
S
8

A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
C only).
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8 Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center

A
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule I
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. N
T
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. N
❏ Replace the spark plugs. A
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only). N
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. C
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. E
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, snow plowing, or
frequent trailer towing. S
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. C
H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
E
replace if necessary. D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date
8

A
I 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or 80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
N
T 54 Months Maintenance Schedule
E Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
A filter. 80,000 miles (130 000 km).
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C irregular wear, even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
S ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 comes first.
only). ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
C
H ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
D ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
U change if using your vehicle for police,
L taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
E towing.
S

A
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or I
N
66 Months Maintenance T
Service Schedule E
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
filter. A
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of N
irregular wear, even if it occurs before C
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 S
only). C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date
8

A
I 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the spark plugs.
N ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
C ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
S ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
H
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E
D ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
U replace if necessary.
L ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
E
S

A
N
78 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
filter. 112,000 miles (182 000 km). A
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
S
only). ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
C
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. H
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months E
whichever comes first. D
❏ Flush and replace power steering fluid. U
L
E
S
8

A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
A 120,000 miles (195 000 km).
N ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
E ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
S
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
C
H ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
E
D
U
L
E
S

A
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or I
N
Schedule 102 Months Maintenance T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule E
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
128,000 miles (208 000 km). filter. A
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of N
❏ Replace the spark plugs. irregular wear, even if it occurs before C
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 S
❏ Change the transfer case fluid. only). C
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. H
U
L
E
S
8

A
I 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N
T Schedule 114 Months Maintenance
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A 144,000 miles (234 000 km). filter.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
S
❏ Inspect the CV joints. only).
C
H ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
D damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
U ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
L off-road or frequent trailer towing.
E
S

A
WARNING! I
N
• You can be badly injured working on or around a T
E
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you N
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If A
you have any doubt about your ability to perform N
C
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent E
mechanic.
S
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your C
vehicle could result in a component malfunction H
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This E
D
could cause an accident. U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 473 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 474 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 474
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
9
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
YOUR VEHICLE At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
Be Reasonable With Requests the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
9
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726–4636
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center. In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
a Bell Relay Service operator.
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. 9
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related MOPAR姞 PARTS
concerns. MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
WARNING! mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
dealer, and the manufacturer. port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
http://www.safercar.gov. cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
• Service Manuals • Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts. Call toll free at:
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia- • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians Or
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by- • www.techauthority.com
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
TIRE QUALITY GRADES habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
requirements in addition to these grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart 9
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
INDEX
10
482 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 418 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 408 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,308
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 19
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,260,411 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,330 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,62,79,200 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 260
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
INDEX 483
Automatic Transmission Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,423
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,428 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,451 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426,451 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,442
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 449
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79 Caps, Filler
Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,451 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
10
484 INDEX
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,232
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,255 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Check Engine Light Connector
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,403 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 246
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,73 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 419
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cleaning Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,420
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
INDEX 485
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Disposal
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . 418,450 Driving
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,384
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,258,264 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 160
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 203
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Dipsticks Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10
486 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 403 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,414
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Filters
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,450
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Flashers
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,450 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,189
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
INDEX 487
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fluid Level Checks Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,402
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 450 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,200,445 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Gauges
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,123
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
10
488 INDEX
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,180
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 154
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Hitches
Hazard Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 154 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
INDEX 489
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,189 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 LATCH
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 155 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 68
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,147
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,62,79,200
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
10
490 INDEX
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,164
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,443 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . 199 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,443
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,200,445 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,443
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 189
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,426
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,196 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
INDEX 491
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lower Anchors and Tether for Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,384 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,476
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . . 403 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,57,60
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10
492 INDEX
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,450 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,477
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,450 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402,403 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 314
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Power
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . 165,170
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
INDEX 493
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Shifting out of Transfer
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,303 Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,373
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Remote Control
Programming Transmitters Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 253
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 417,419 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,70
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . 368,370 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10
494 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,140
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 418,450
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,79 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 48 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,68 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,232
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
INDEX 495
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,273
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,370 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,373 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Steel Carcass Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Steering
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,303
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,189 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sliding Rear Window Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,326 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,441
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 330
10
496 INDEX
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,384
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 260 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,315
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,73 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 314,330 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,318
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,318,479 Steel Carcass Ply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
INDEX 497
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,395 Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Transmission
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,427
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Transmitter Battery Service
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Transmitter Programming
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,189,443
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10
498 INDEX
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Water
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 246 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,387
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,342 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,441 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,156,413
Warning Lights Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,413
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,413 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
be observed during installation.
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than nor-
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
mal may require special precautions.
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This con- All installations should be checked for possible interference
nection should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accu-
racy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
Chrysler Group LLC
12DD43-126-AD 4th Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2012 Ram Chassis Cab

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Ram Chassis Cab

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Ram Chassis Cab

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab

Vehicle Identification Number

䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF 2

Power Door Locks — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch Location

Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control

Power Window Switches

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing

Latch Plate To Buckle

Removing Slack From Belt

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Head Restraint Adjustment

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror

Power Mirror Controls

Power Mirror Movement

Trailer Towing Position Blindspot Mirror

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Lumbar Control Switch

Manual Seat Adjuster

Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

(Continued) Head Restraints

Front Head Restraints

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

Adjustable Rear Head Restraints

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)

Headlight Switch Location

Tilt Steering Lever

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

Power Outlet — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder

Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box

Rear Door Storage

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to

Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin

Storage Bin Crew Cab Storage

Grocery Bag Hooks

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Press and release the UP button to scroll

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Defrost Mode

Floor Mode NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

4500/5500 Tire Inflation

CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the

CHASSIS CAB 4500

Consider the following items when computing the